{"title":"Flott Machines","description":"","products":[{"product_id":"flott-segatrice-nastro-verticale-vbs-400-plus","title":"Flott VBS 400 Plus vertical band saw for metal","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott VBS 400 Plus vertical band saw is a metal band saw for professional use, weighing 465 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 4.0 kW three-phase 400 V with inverter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting speed: 50 – 1000 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting width: 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting height: 390 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade dimensions: 3600 x 13 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTable dimensions: 600 x 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the VBS 400 Plus vertical band saw and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the VBS 400 Plus vertical band saw for cutting steel, aluminum, and cast iron profiles and bars, sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott VBS 400 Plus vertical band saw is part of the Flott metal band saw range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the VBS 400 Plus vertical band saw for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe VBS 400 Plus vertical band saw is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintenance technicians\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting on thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or metal circular saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 – 1000 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e390 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 x 600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e465 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2225 x 1120 x 770 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStructure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRigid welded steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLighting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated LED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3600 x 13 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.0 kW three-phase 400 V with inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7005 \/ RAL 7035\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the VBS 400 Plus vertical band saw cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, pipes, solid bars, and laminates in steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce blade speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBi-metal blade for steel cutting, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades in various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Band speed\" data in the technical table: typically adjustable over 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Weight\" data in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and anchoring. The machine must be positioned in clear space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51976607433032,"sku":"410010","price":18537.63,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Segatrice_a_nastro_verticale_Flott_VBS_400_Plus_4_0_kW_con_inverter.png?v=1763064266"},{"product_id":"flott-segatrice-nastro-orizzontale-hbs-450-sanc","title":"Automatic band saw for metal Flott HBS 450 SANC","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 450 SANC automatic band saw is a metal band saw for professional use, with a cutting capacity of 520 mm, band speed of 20 – 120 m\/min, and a weight of 1600 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 4.0 kW three-phase 400 V with inverter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting system: 2-column with preloaded linear guides\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade speed: 20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade dimensions: 6020 x 41 x 1.3 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePulley diameter: Ø 550 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting capacity (clearance between columns): 520 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Flott HBS 450 SANC automatic band saw and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops use the HBS 450 SANC automatic band saw for cutting steel, aluminum, and cast iron profiles and bars, sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 450 SANC automatic band saw is part of the Flott metal band saw range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit is an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the HBS 450 SANC automatic band saw for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HBS 450 SANC automatic band saw is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintenance personnel\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting on thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or circular metal saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-column with preloaded linear guides\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting capacity (clearance between columns)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e520 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum cut diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e780 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2890 x 2055 x 2030 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1600 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePulley diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeeding system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic, stroke 600 mm (up to 999 repetitions)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum workpiece (L x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 x 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoolant tank capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChip evacuator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScraper type, motorized\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVise system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic with adjustable pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6020 x 41 x 1.3 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4.0 kW three-phase 400 V with inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGuided on linear guides, hydraulic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame RAL 7035, body RAL 7005\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the HBS 450 SANC automatic band saw cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, pipes, solid bars, and rolled steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce band speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBimetallic blade for steel cutting, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades in various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Band speed\" data in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" data in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and fixing. The machine must be positioned in an open space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51976670970184,"sku":"570035","price":57593.28,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Segatrice_automatica_Flott_HBS_450_SANC_industriale_a_2_colonne_4_0_kW.png?v=1763064398"},{"product_id":"flott-segatrice-nastro-orizzontale-hbs-450-ha","title":"Metal Cutting Band Saw Flott Semi-automatic Band Saw HBS 450 HA","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 450 HA semi-automatic band saw is a metal band saw for professional use, with a cutting capacity of 610 mm, a band speed of 20 – 120 m\/min, and a weight of 800 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 3 kW three-phase 400 V with inverter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade speed: 20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade dimensions: 5200 x 34 x 1.1 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePulley diameter: Ø 480 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting capacity (useful clearance): 610 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 780 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HBS 450 HA semi-automatic band saw and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the HBS 450 HA semi-automatic band saw for cutting profiles and bars in steel, aluminum, and cast iron, with sectioning of raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 450 HA semi-automatic band saw is part of the Flott range of metal band saws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South of Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the HBS 450 HA semi-automatic band saw for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HBS 450 HA semi-automatic band saw is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting of steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintenance personnel\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning of raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting on thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or circular saws for metal).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting capacity (useful clearance)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngle adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0° – 60° right\/left\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5200 x 34 x 1.1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGround and adjustable carbide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e780 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2780 x 1440 x 1560 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e800 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePulley diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 480 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoolant tank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 L integrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChip brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSynchronized, motorized\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVise system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFloating hydraulic, full stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 kW three-phase 400 V with inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic hydraulic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7035 \/ RAL 7005\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the HBS 450 HA semi-automatic band saw cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, tubes, solid bars, and rolled materials in steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce band speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBi-metal blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades in various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Band speed\" data in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Weight\" data in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and anchoring. The machine must be positioned in an open space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51976692498760,"sku":"570525","price":27054.42,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Segatrice_a_nastro_semiautomatica_Flott_HBS_450_HA_3_kW.jpg?v=1763065788"},{"product_id":"flott-segatrice-nastro-orizzontale-hbs-350-sanc","title":"Flott HBS 350 SANC Automatic Metal Bandsaw","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 350 SANC automatic band saw is a professional metal band saw, with a cutting capacity of 420 mm, band speed of 20 – 120 m\/min, and a weight of 1200 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 3 kW three-phase 400 V with inverter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting system: 2-column with preloaded linear guides\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade speed: 20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade dimensions: 4780 x 34 x 1.1 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePulley diameter: Ø 450 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting capacity (useful light): 420 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HBS 350 SANC automatic band saw and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the HBS 350 SANC automatic band saw for cutting profiles and bars of steel, aluminum, and cast iron, segmenting raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 350 SANC automatic band saw is part of the Flott range of metal band saws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the HBS 350 SANC automatic band saw for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HBS 350 SANC automatic band saw is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintainers\u003c\/strong\u003e: segmenting raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting on thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or circular metal saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2-column with preloaded linear guides\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting capacity (useful light)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum cut diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e780 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum remnant length\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2300 x 2050 x 2000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePulley diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum workpiece (L x H)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 x 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoolant tank capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine colors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFrame RAL 7035, body RAL 7005\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVise system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic, floating, adjustable double pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChip conveyor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScraper type under the cutting channel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4780 x 34 x 1.1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 kW three-phase 400 V with inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble pump\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHydraulic 600 mm (repetitions up to 999)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the HBS 350 SANC automatic band saw cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, tubes, solid bars, and rolled steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce band speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBimetal blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades in various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Band speed\" data in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Weight\" data in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and fastening. The machine must be positioned in a free space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51976705573192,"sku":"570030","price":44222.84,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Segatrice_automatica_Flott_HBS_350_SANC_3_kW_a_2_colonne_industrial.jpg?v=1763065560"},{"product_id":"flott-segatrice-nastro-orizzontale-hbs-350-ha","title":"Flott semi-automatic metal bandsaw HBS 350 HA","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 350 HA semi-automatic band saw is a metal band saw for professional use, with a cutting capacity of 510 mm and a weight of 710 kg. Krollit has been an official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 3 kW three-phase 400 V with inverter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting speed: 20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade dimensions: 4780 x 34 x 1.1 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePulley diameter: Ø 450 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting capacity (clearance): 510 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 761 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HBS 350 HA semi-automatic band saw and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabricators use the HBS 350 HA semi-automatic band saw for cutting steel, aluminum, and cast iron profiles and bars, sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 350 HA semi-automatic band saw is part of Flott's range of metal band saws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the HBS 350 HA semi-automatic band saw for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HBS 350 HA semi-automatic band saw is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabricators\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintainers\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting on thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or circular metal saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting capacity (clearance)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e510 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting pressure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e761 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2568 x 1070 x 1500 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e710 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePulley diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMiter adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0°–60° right\/left\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVise system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFull-stroke floating hydraulic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoolant tank capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 L\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eChip brush\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSynchronized, motorized\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4780 x 34 x 1.1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGround and adjustable carbide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 kW three-phase 400 V with inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeeding system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic hydraulic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7035 \/ RAL 7005\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the HBS 350 HA semi-automatic band saw cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, tubes, solid bars, and rolled steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce band speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBi-metal blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades in various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Band speed\" in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) prolongs blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and anchoring. The machine must be positioned in clear space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51976721596744,"sku":"570520","price":23058.78,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Segatrice_a_nastro_semiautomatica_Flott_HBS_350_HA_3_kW.jpg?v=1763065376"},{"product_id":"segatrici-flott-hbs-350-anc","title":"Metal band saw Flott band saw HBS 350 ANC","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 350 ANC band saw is a metal-cutting band saw for professional use, with a cutting capacity of 510 mm, a 3 kW motor, and a weight of 950 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor voltage: 400 V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 3 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting speed: 20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade: 4780 x 34 x 1.1 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlywheel diameter: 450 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting capacity: 510 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HBS 350 ANC band saw and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the HBS 350 ANC band saw for cutting profiles and bars in steel, aluminum, and cast iron, sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 350 ANC band saw is part of the Flott range of metal band saws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian customer assistance available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the HBS 350 ANC band saw is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HBS 350 ANC band saw is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintainers\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting on thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or metal circular saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e761 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e950 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2440 x 2880 x 1540 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor voltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStroke 600 mm, up to 999 repetitions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlywheel diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. workpiece to be cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 x 5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCoolant tank\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine colors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7035 (frame), RAL 7005 (body)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e510 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4780 x 34 x 1.1 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the HBS 350 ANC band saw cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, tubes, solid bars, and laminates in steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe cutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce the band speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBimetallic blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades in various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Band speed\" data in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip trays.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Weight\" data in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and fastening. The machine must be positioned in a clear space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51976732475720,"sku":"570025","price":41685.41,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Segatrice_a_nastro_Flott_HBS_350_ANC_per_tagli_automatici_e_inclinati.png?v=1763065193"},{"product_id":"segatrici-flott-hbs-250-ha","title":"Metal band saw Flott band saw HBS 250 HA","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 250 HA band saw is a metal band saw for professional use, with a cutting capacity of 320 mm, a 1.5 kW motor, and a weight of 390 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor voltage: 400 V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 1.5 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting speed: 20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade: 2910 x 27 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlywheel diameter: 325 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting capacity: 320 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HBS 250 HA band saw and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and carpentry shops use the HBS 250 HA band saw for cutting steel, aluminum, and cast iron profiles and bars, with raw material sectioning before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 250 HA band saw is part of the Flott metal band saw range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the HBS 250 HA band saw for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe hbs 250 ha band saw is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and carpentry\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintainers\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting of thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or metal circular saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 – 120 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngle adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual with scale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e760 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e390 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1480 x 1700 x 2000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSupport table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRotating, solid cast iron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlywheel diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e325 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine colors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7035 (frame), RAL 7005 (body)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOperation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSemi-automatic, hydraulic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCooling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated electric pump\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2910 x 27 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor voltage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the HBS 250 HA band saw cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, pipes, solid bars, and laminates in steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce the band speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBimetallic blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades in various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Band speed\" in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and fixing. The machine must be positioned in a free space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51976823472456,"sku":"570010","price":12939.44,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Segatrice_a_nastro_Flott_HBS_250_HA_compatta_e_idraulica.png?v=1763064806"},{"product_id":"sega-a-nastro-portatile-flott-pbs-120-plus-per-metalli","title":"Metal Bandsaw Flott PBS 120 Plus","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott PBS 120 Plus is a professional metal bandsaw, weighing 38 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting speed: 35 – 75 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade dimensions: 1620 × 13 × 0.65 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: AC 230 V (0.25 \/ 0.37 kW)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMiter cut: 0° – 60°\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMachine dimensions: 810 × 530 × 450 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 38 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the PBS 120 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and carpentry shops use the PBS 120 Plus for cutting steel, aluminum, and cast iron profiles and bars, sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott PBS 120 Plus is part of the Flott metal bandsaw range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the PBS 120 Plus for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe PBS 120 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and carpentry shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintenance workers\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cuts on thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or metal circular saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1620 × 13 × 0.65 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCast iron with quick release lever\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade guide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarbide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePreparation\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCooling and length stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOrigin\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGermany\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35 – 75 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMiter cut\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0° – 60°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e810 × 530 × 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAC 230 V (0.25 \/ 0.37 kW)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the PBS 120 Plus cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, tubes, solid bars, and rolled steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce band speed and use blades with appropriate teeth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBimetal blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades in various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Band speed\" data in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" data in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and fastening. The machine must be positioned in a clear space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51981119553864,"sku":"570505","price":2045.09,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_PBS_120_Plus_sega_a_nastro_per_metalli.jpg?v=1763063785"},{"product_id":"seghe-circolari-flott-ks-315m","title":"Hand-held circular saw Flott KS 315 M","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott KS 315 M is a manual circular saw for professional use, with a 1.3 \/ 1.9 kW motor. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 400 V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 1.3 \/ 1.9 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNumber of speeds: 2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWing span: 110 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 980 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMachine dimensions (without base): 630 × 1030 × 880 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the KS 315 M and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KS 315 M is a manual circular saw for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlott KS 315 M is part of the Flott range of manual circular saws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the KS 315 M for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe KS 315 M is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMobile carpentry and installation sites\u003c\/strong\u003e: portable straight cuts on boards and battens directly on site.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpenters and installers\u003c\/strong\u003e: installation work with a manual tool for quick cuts on light materials.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e stationary precision cuts on large panels (for series production, consider table saws or fixed panel saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions (without base)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e630 × 1030 × 880 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions with cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1000 × 1100 × 1800 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWing span\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSwiveling head\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes, left\/right\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCooling tank capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 liters\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNumber of speeds\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.3 \/ 1.9 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStructure material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCast iron\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the cutting capacity of the KS 315 M?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Cutting capacity\" in the technical table for maximum thickness at 90° and 45°.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity at 45° is always less than the cut at 90°. Check both values if you often work with angled cuts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eSupported blade diameter?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Blade diameter\" in the table: typically Ø 250-350 mm for professional models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLarger blades offer greater cutting depth but require adequate motor power. Check the standard arbor hole.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it run on 230 V or 400 V?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Voltage\" in the table: the MKS-351 model is available in 400 V three-phase.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional circular saws over 2.2 kW require a three-phase line. Check power supply availability on site.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated dust extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional saws have a dust extractor connection with a typical diameter of Ø50-100 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential to reduce respirable dust and maintain visibility of the cutting area.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs it suitable for construction site use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, manual saws are designed for frequent relocation and on-site cutting of boards and battens.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor stationary production of large panels, consider fixed table saws with a sliding carriage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51981290832200,"sku":"560835","price":5111.48,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Sega_circolare_per_metalli_Flott_KS_315_M_400_V_due_velocita.jpg?v=1763063408"},{"product_id":"trapani-tb-10-eco-plus","title":"Flott TB 10 Eco Plus Pillar Drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott TB 10 Eco Plus is a professional pillar drill with a speed of 250 – 3,000 rpm (variable), 0.45 kW motor, and a weight of 30 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V AC\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 0.45 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60): 10 \/ 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle taper: B16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThroat depth: 180 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TB 10 Eco Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TB 10 Eco Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TB 10 Eco Plus is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TB 10 Eco Plus for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TB 10 Eco Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintainers and repair workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine; for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle Taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots (No., pitch, width)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 \/ 100 mm \/ 12–20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 – 3,000 rpm (variable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\/table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e105 – 245 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking surface (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 × 200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 × 248 × 460 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrill head height adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThroat depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLighting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated LED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 \/ 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V AC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.45 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the TB 10 Eco Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloys, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in step models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while step models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle Taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) attachments are international standards, and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from about 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (industrial Profi models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench; pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51981591281992,"sku":"217200","price":2119.21,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_da_banco_TB_10_Eco_Plus_con_controllo_digitale_e_LED.jpg?v=1763062292"},{"product_id":"trapani-tb-10-plus","title":"Flott TB 10 Plus Bench Drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott TB 10 Plus is a professional pillar drill, with speeds of 60 – 6,000 rpm, a 0.54 kW motor, and a weight of 44 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V three-phase (frequency controlled)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 0.54 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60): 10 \/ 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapping capacity: M6\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle: B16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 60 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TB 10 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shops and metalworking workshops use the TB 10 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap, and repetitive work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TB 10 Plus is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TB 10 Plus for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TB 10 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMachine shops and metalworking workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance workers and repair workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 \/ 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM6\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 – 6,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\/surface distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 – 315 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital OLED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface (L × W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 × 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 × 520 × 820 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e44 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead height adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProjection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 transverse \/ 14–26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V three-phase (frequency controlled)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.54 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the TB 10 Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed alloys, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in step models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while step models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tap?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy bench, while column or radial models require floor fixing with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51982303035720,"sku":"212505","price":3124.53,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_da_banco_TB_10_Plus_B16_con_display_OLED_e_funzione_di_maschiatura.jpg?v=1763061914"},{"product_id":"trapani-flott-turbo-drill","title":"Flott Turbo Drill pillar drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott Turbo Drill is a professional pillar drill, with speeds of 100 – 10,000 rpm, a 0.54 kW motor, and a weight of 44 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V three-phase frequency controlled\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 0.54 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60): 6 \/ 8 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapping capacity: M5\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle: B12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 60 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the Turbo Drill and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the Turbo Drill for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott Turbo Drill is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Turbo Drill for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Turbo Drill is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and carpentry\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance workers and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6 \/ 8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 – 10,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\/surface distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 – 315 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital OLED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface (L × W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 × 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 × 520 × 820 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e44 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrill head height adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProjection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 transverse \/ 14–26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V three-phase frequency controlled\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.54 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the Turbo Drill?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard, unhardened steel. On harder or alloyed materials, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3, or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards, and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (industrial Profi models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51982518354248,"sku":"212506","price":4182.2,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_da_banco_Flott_Turbo_Drill_con_display_OLED_e_velocit_10.000_giri_min.jpg?v=1763061570"},{"product_id":"trapani-flott-tb-13-plus","title":"Pillar Drill Flott TB 13 Plus MK2","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TB 13 Plus MK2 is a professional pillar drill with a speed of 40 – 4,000 rpm (adjustable), a 0.54 kW motor, and a weight of 62 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V three-phase (frequency-controlled)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 0.54 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60): 13 \/ 15 mm (12 Nm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapping capacity: M10\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle: B16 (Art. 212.500) \/ MK II (Art. 212.503)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 60 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TB 13 Plus MK2 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TB 13 Plus MK2 for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TB 13 Plus MK2 is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer service available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TB 13 Plus MK2 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TB 13 Plus MK2 is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobbyist use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact benchtop models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13 \/ 15 mm (12 Nm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable ring with positive lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB16 (Art. 212.500) \/ MK II (Art. 212.503)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 – 4,000 rpm (adjustable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital OLED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking surface (L × W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 × 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 × 520 × 850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e62 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProjection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 crossed \/ 14–26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V three-phase (frequency-controlled)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.54 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the TB 13 Plus MK2?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard, unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact benchtop models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBenchtop models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51982708965704,"sku":"212503","price":4099.33,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_da_banco_Flott_TB_13_Plus_con_filettatura_M10_e_display_OLED.jpg?v=1763061401"},{"product_id":"trapani-flott-tb-10-basic-plus","title":"Flott TB 10 Basic Plus Bench Drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott TB 10 Basic Plus is a professional pillar drilling machine, with speeds of 250 – 3,000 rpm (adjustable), 0.45 kW motor, weight 44 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V AC\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 0.45 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60): 10 \/ 12 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle: B16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 60 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProjection: 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TB 10 Basic Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TB 10 Basic Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlott TB 10 Basic Plus is part of the Flott pillar drilling machine range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TB 10 Basic Plus for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TB 10 Basic Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance workers and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 \/ 12 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGraduated scale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable ring\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 – 3,000 rpm (adjustable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\/surface distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 – 315 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface (L × D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 × 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 × 520 × 820 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e44 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrill head height adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProjection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 transverse \/ 14–26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V AC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.45 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the TB 10 Basic Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. For harder materials or alloyed metals, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed rate to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reducers) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (industrial Profi models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51984610132296,"sku":"217400","price":2728.02,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_da_banco_Flott_TB_10_Basic_Plus_con_LED_e_velocit_variabile.jpg?v=1763060533"},{"product_id":"trapani-flott-tb-15-plus","title":"Flott TB 15 Plus Bench Drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott TB 15 Plus is a professional column drill with a speed of 40 – 4,000 rpm (adjustable), a 0.75 kW motor, and a weight of 65 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V three-phase (frequency controlled)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 0.75 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60): 15 \/ 18 mm (17 Nm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapping capacity: M12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 70 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThroat depth: 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TB 15 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TB 15 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap chuck, and repetitive work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TB 15 Plus is part of the Flott column drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TB 15 Plus for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TB 15 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine; for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 \/ 18 mm (17 Nm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 – 4,000 rpm (adjustable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\/surface distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e85 – 370 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK II\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital OLED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface (L × W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 × 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 × 520 × 850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e65 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThroat depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 \/ pitch 125 mm \/ 14–26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V three-phase (frequency controlled)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.75 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the TB 15 Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed rate to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards, and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tap chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from about 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (industrial Profi models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while column or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51984878305608,"sku":"212755","price":4343.35,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_da_banco_Flott_TB_15_Plus_con_filettatura_M12_e_display_OLED.jpg?v=1763039678"},{"product_id":"trapani-flott-tb-18-plus","title":"Flott TB 18 Plus Bench Pillar Drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TB 18 Plus is a professional pillar drill with speeds ranging from 30 – 3,000 rpm, a 0.75 kW motor, and a weight of 170 kg. Krollit has been an official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V three-phase (frequency controlled)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 0.75 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60): 18 \/ 20 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax torque: 17 Nm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapping capacity: M12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TB 18 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TB 18 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on various sized pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TB 18 Plus is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare part order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TB 18 Plus for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TB 18 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance personnel and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on various sized pieces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for domestic use, consider compact benchtop models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e18 \/ 20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 – 3,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK II\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital OLED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e82 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface (W × D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e340 × 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e355 × 705 × 1,065 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e170 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax torque\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17 Nm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProjection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 \/ pitch 125 mm \/ 13–26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V three-phase (frequency controlled)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.75 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the TB 18 Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed metals, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed rate to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from about 25 kg (compact benchtop models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBenchtop models are installed on a robust workbench, while pillar or radial drills require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51985008591176,"sku":"218303","price":5662.22,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_da_banco_Flott_TB_18_Plus_con_filettatura_M12_e_display_OLED.jpg?v=1763034061"},{"product_id":"trapani-flott-tb-20-plus","title":"Pillar Drill Flott TB 20 Plus","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TB 20 Plus is a professional pillar drilling machine, with a speed range of 40 – 4,000 rpm (adjustable), a 1.5 kW motor, and a weight of 170 kg. Krollit has been the official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 400 V three-phase with frequency converter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 1.5 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60): 20 \/ 23 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapping capacity: M12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThroat depth: 240 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TB 20 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TB 20 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TB 20 Plus is part of the Flott pillar drilling machine range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been the official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TB 20 Plus for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TB 20 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for domestic use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 \/ 23 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 – 4,000 rpm (adjustable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK II\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital OLED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e82 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface (L × W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e340 × 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e355 × 705 × 1,065 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e170 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThroat depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 \/ pitch 125 mm \/ 13–26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase with frequency converter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the TB 20 Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in step models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while step models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor fixing with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51985286889800,"sku":"220105","price":6841.99,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_da_banco_Flott_TB_20_Plus_con_filettatura_M12_e_display_OLED.jpg?v=1763032490"},{"product_id":"flott-tb-13-plus-trapano-da-banco","title":"Bench Drill Flott TB 13 Plus B16","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott TB 13 Plus B16 is a professional pillar drill, with speeds of 40 – 4,000 rpm (adjustable), 0.54 kW motor, weight 62 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 230 V three-phase (frequency controlled)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 0.54 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60): 13 \/ 15 mm (12 Nm)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThreading capacity: M10\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle: B16 (Art. 212.500) \/ MK II (Art. 212.503)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 60 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TB 13 Plus B16 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TB 13 Plus B16 for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlott TB 13 Plus B16 is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TB 13 Plus B16 for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TB 13 Plus B16 is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance workers and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for domestic use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capabilities\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13 \/ 15 mm (12 Nm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThreading capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRing with positive lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB16 (Art. 212.500) \/ MK II (Art. 212.503)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 – 4,000 rpm (adjustable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital OLED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface (L × W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 × 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 × 520 × 850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e62 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProjection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 crossed \/ 14–26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 V three-phase (frequency controlled)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.54 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the TB 13 Plus B16?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Threading\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor fixing with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51985723064648,"sku":"212500","price":3887.05,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_TB_13_Plus_B16_Trapano_da_banco_professionale.jpg?v=1763031218"},{"product_id":"flott-sb-20-plus-trapano-a-colonna-professionale","title":"Pillar drill Flott SB 20 Plus","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB 20 Plus is a professional pillar drill, with speeds of 40 – 4,000 rpm (adjustable), 1.5 kW motor, weight 195 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 400 V three-phase with frequency converter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 1.5 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60): 20 \/ 23 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapping capacity: M12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThroat: 240 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB 20 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops use the SB 20 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB 20 Plus is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SB 20 Plus for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB 20 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (steel E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 \/ 23 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 – 4,000 rpm (adjustable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\/surface distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 – 870 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK II\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital OLED\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e82 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface (L × W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e340 × 280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e355 × 705 × 1,825 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e195 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThroat\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 \/ pitch 125 mm \/ 13–26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase with frequency converter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the SB 20 Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the technical table of the machine.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloy steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you adjust the spindle speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) fittings are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reducers) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from about 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while column or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51985924456776,"sku":"220100","price":7453.24,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_SB_20_Plus_Trapano_a_colonna_professionale_con_display_OLED.jpg?v=1763027697"},{"product_id":"macchine-officina-flott-bem-250-plus","title":"Flott BEM 250 Plus Deburring Machine","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BEM 250 Plus is a deburring machine for professional use, with a 2.1 \/ 1.8 kW motor, weighing 85 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 400 V \/ 50 Hz three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 2.1 \/ 1.8 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRotation speed: 1,400 \/ 2,800 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrush diameter: 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrush width: 60 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMounting hole: 50.8 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the BEM 250 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe BEM 250 Plus is a deburring machine for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BEM 250 Plus is part of the Flott deburring machine range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the BEM 250 Plus for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe BEM 250 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: deburring, chamfering, and finishing metal parts after processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSheet metal production and laser cutting\u003c\/strong\u003e: removing burrs from precisely and repeatedly cut parts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProcessing of non-metallic materials\u003c\/strong\u003e: verify abrasive compatibility with plastic or wood materials.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrush width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e930 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum material dimension\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 × 140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUsable working surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e590 × 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500 × 560 × 1,250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e85 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrush diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMounting hole\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50.8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRotation speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,400 \/ 2,800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 80 mm with cap\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V \/ 50 Hz three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2.1 \/ 1.8 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody RAL 7035 \/ panels RAL 7005\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the BEM 250 Plus used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDeburring machine: removes burrs, chamfers edges, and finishes metal parts after cutting or processing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eParticularly useful after laser cutting, blanking, or milling to avoid subsequent manual processing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat thickness does it process?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Working thickness\" in the technical table: typically up to 100-250 mm per piece.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlott BEM deburring machines process single pieces or batches with an abrasive belt system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated suction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, professional machines are prepared for suction connectable to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSuction is essential for fine metal dust which can be irritating or explosive in concentration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat abrasives does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard replaceable abrasive belts. Check the technical data sheet for compatible belt dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor different metals (steel, stainless steel, aluminum), specific abrasive grits and materials are needed to avoid contamination.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Flott spare parts are available. Customer assistance in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the availability of specific spare parts (belts, rollers, motor) in the technical documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51986018926920,"sku":"373150","price":2562.09,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Macchina_per_sbavatura_Flott_BEM_250_Plus_con_spazzola_in_acciaio_250.jpg?v=1763063008"},{"product_id":"macchine-industriali-flott-bem-250-pro","title":"Flott BEM 250 Pro Deburring Machine","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BEM 250 Pro is a deburring machine for professional use, with a 3.0 kW motor, weighing 410 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 400 V \/ 50 Hz three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor power: 3.0 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRotation speed: 600 – 2,700 rpm (adjustable)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrush diameter: 250 mm (3 pieces)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBrush width: 60 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMounting bore: 50.8 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the BEM 250 Pro and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe BEM 250 Pro is a deburring machine for professional use distributed by Krollit.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BEM 250 Pro is part of the Flott range of deburring machines, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the BEM 250 Pro is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe BEM 250 Pro is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: deburring, chamfering, and finishing of metal parts after processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSheet metal production and laser cutting\u003c\/strong\u003e: removal of burrs from precisely and repeatedly cut parts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eProcessing of non-metallic materials\u003c\/strong\u003e: verify abrasive compatibility with plastic or wood materials.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrush width\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1,050 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaximum material size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 mm (horizontal\/vertical)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e680 × 1,200 × 1,380 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e410 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrush diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 mm (3 pieces)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMounting bore\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50.8 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine structure\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReinforced steel with openable doors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtraction system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eConnection for external system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRotation speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 – 2,700 rpm (adjustable)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V \/ 50 Hz three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody RAL 7035 \/ panels RAL 7005\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the BEM 250 Pro used for?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDeburring machine: removes burrs, chamfers edges, and finishes metal parts after cutting or processing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eParticularly useful after laser cutting, blanking, or milling to avoid subsequent manual processing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat thickness does it work with?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Working thickness\" in the technical table: typically up to 100-250 mm per piece.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlott BEM deburring machines process single pieces or batches with an abrasive belt system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, professional machines have a predisposition for extraction connectable to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExtraction is essential for fine metal dust which can be irritating or explosive in concentration.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat abrasives does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStandard replaceable abrasive belts. Check the technical data sheet for compatible belt dimensions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor different metals (steel, stainless steel, aluminum), specific abrasive grits and materials are needed to avoid contamination.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eAre spare parts and assistance available?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, original Flott spare parts are available. Customer support in Italian is available.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the availability of specific spare parts (belts, rollers, motor) in the technical documentation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51986075418952,"sku":"373155","price":15187.07,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Macchina_per_sbavatura_Flott_BEM_250_Pro_per_tubi_profili.jpg?v=1763063238"},{"product_id":"levigatrici-flott-bsm-150-a","title":"Flott BSM 150 A Belt Grinder","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BSM 150 A is a professional belt grinder with a 3.75 kW motor and a weight of 100 kg. Krollit has been the official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 400 V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMain motor power: 3.75 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVacuum cleaner power: 0.37 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBelt speed: 30 m\/s\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAbrasive belt dimensions: 2000 × 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlat grinding area: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the BSM 150 A and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the BSM 150 A for grinding and satin finishing stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, removing burrs and finishing surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BSM 150 A is part of the Flott belt grinder range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the BSM 150 A for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe BSM 150 A is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e: grinding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry and production workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: burr removal, cutting deburring, and surface finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror polishing chrome (dedicated polishing machines with abrasive pastes are needed for final chrome finishes).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbrasive belt dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 × 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuction volume\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 630 m³\/h\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1100 × 550 × 1035 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with packaging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e800 × 600 × 1450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMain motor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.75 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVacuum cleaner power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.37 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat grinding area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuction brush diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 80 mm (integrated system)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 years on main motor (single shift use)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBelt speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 m\/s\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine color\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 9007 (metallic grey)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the BSM 150 A grind?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys and (in some models) also wood with suitable abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA specific belt grit is used for each material: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat abrasive belt dimensions does it mount?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt dimensions\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumable spare parts: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer Vario or multi-step speeds (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u0026gt;20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u0026lt;10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to avoid burns.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated suction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer a suction connection for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSuction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and for wood (fire risk from sparks). Check connection diameter for connection to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for bench and column models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eColumn models require floor mounting, while bench models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51986104713544,"sku":"374021","price":3863.75,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_BSM_150_A_Levigatrice_a_nastro_con_aspirazione_e_base.jpg?v=1763030890"},{"product_id":"levigatrici-flott-bsm-75","title":"Flott BSM 75 Belt Grinder","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BSM 75 is a professional-grade belt sander, weighing 80 kg. Krollit has been an official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBelt dimensions: 2000 x 75 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSanding area: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBelt speed: 30 m\/s\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSander motor: 3.75 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 80 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions with VP: 800 × 600 × 1450 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the BSM 75 and for what purpose?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the BSM 75 for sanding and satin finishing stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, removing burrs and finishing surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BSM 75 is part of the Flott belt sander range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance in selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the BSM 75 for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe BSM 75 is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e: sanding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetalworking shops and production laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: deburring, removing cutting burrs, and surface finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror polishing chrome (dedicated polishing machines with abrasive pastes are needed for final chrome finishes).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBelt dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 x 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e800 × 600 × 1450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSander motor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.75 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVacuum motor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e,\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSanding area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction system\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuction capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e,\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBelt speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 m\/s\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the BSM 75 sand?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys, and (in some models) even wood with appropriate abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor each material, a specific belt grit is used: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat abrasive belt sizes does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt dimensions\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumable spare parts: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize the finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer variable or multi-step speeds (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u003e20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u003c10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to avoid burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated dust extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer a dust extraction connection for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and wood (fire risk from sparks). Check the connection diameter for connection to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for bench and pillar models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePillar models require floor mounting, while bench models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"BSM 75 – Standard","offer_id":52021692825928,"sku":"374000","price":2225.78,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"BSM 75 A – With suction","offer_id":52021692858696,"sku":"374001","price":3018.28,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"BSM 75 A\/pol. – With suction + dual speed","offer_id":52021692891464,"sku":"374002","price":3548.59,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/annigaranzia_4.png?v=1763484701"},{"product_id":"segatrici-fluss-hbs-225-a","title":"Metal bandsaw Flott band saw HBS 225 A","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 225 A band saw is a metal cutting band saw for professional use, with a cutting capacity of 275 mm \/ 10.83\", a pole-changeable motor (kW), and a weight of 370 kg. Krollit has been an official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower supply: 400 V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade dimensions: 2720 x 27 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlywheel diameter: 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting speed: 40 – 80 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting capacity: 275 mm \/ 10.83\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 978 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HBS 225 A band saw and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops use the HBS 225 A band saw for cutting profiles and bars in steel, aluminum, and cast iron, sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 225 A band saw is part of the Flott metal cutting band saw range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the HBS 225 A band saw for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HBS 225 A band saw is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintenance workers\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting of thin sheet metal (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or metal circular saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e978 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1150 x 1588 x 1477 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e370 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlywheel diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months single shift use\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 – 80 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e275 mm \/ 10.83\"\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2720 x 27 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower supply\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor power\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePole-changeable (kW)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the HBS 225 A band saw cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, tubes, solid bars, and rolled steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce the blade speed and use blades with appropriate teeth.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBimetal blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades with various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Blade speed\" data in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) prolongs blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Weight\" data in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and fastening. The machine must be positioned in clear space for managing long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51999831523656,"sku":"570050","price":6345.82,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Segatrice_a_nastro_Flott_HBS_225_A_per_taglio_metalli_di_precisione.png?v=1763117527"},{"product_id":"seghe-a-nastro-flott-hbs-230-anc","title":"Flott HBS 230 ANC Metal Bandsaw","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 230 ANC is a metal bandsaw for professional use, weighing 495 kg. Krollit has been the official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: Three-phase 400 V, 1.1\/1.5 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade dimensions: 2720 x 27 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting speed: 40–80 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlywheels: Ø 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOpening (span): 275 mm \/ 10.83\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 768 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HBS 230 ANC and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the HBS 230 ANC for cutting steel, aluminum, and cast iron profiles and bars, sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 230 ANC is part of the Flott metal bandsaw range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the HBS 230 ANC for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HBS 230 ANC is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintenance workers\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting on thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or circular saws for metal).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–80 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMinimum diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting mode\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFully automatic up to 45°, semi-automatic up to 60°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e768 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2220 x 1650 x 1730 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e495 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlywheels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOpening (span)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e275 mm \/ 10.83\"\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated, 0.2 mm precision\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMin. residual piece\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e180 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7035 \/ RAL 7005\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCooling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElectric pump\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2720 x 27 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-phase 400 V, 1.1\/1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the HBS 230 ANC cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, tubes, solid bars, and laminates in steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce the band speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBimetal blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades with various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Band speed\" in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and anchoring. The machine must be positioned in clear space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":51999946146120,"sku":"570040","price":22257.12,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Sega_a_nastro_automatica_Flott_HBS_230_ANC_per_taglio_metalli.png?v=1763118174"},{"product_id":"seghe-a-nastro-flott-hbs-250-a","title":"Flott HBS 250 A Metal Bandsaw","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 250 A is a professional metal bandsaw, weighing 390 kg. Krollit has been an official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: Three-phase 400 V, 1.5 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBlade dimensions: 2910 x 27 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlywheel diameter: 325 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCutting speed: 20–120 m\/min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpan (opening): 320 mm \/ 12.60\"\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking height: 760 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the HBS 250 A and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the HBS 250 A for cutting steel, aluminum, and cast iron profiles and bars, with raw material sectioning before turning or milling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott HBS 250 A is part of the Flott range of metal bandsaws, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the HBS 250 A for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe HBS 250 A is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: cutting steel profiles and bars with acceptable tolerance for subsequent processing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTurners and industrial maintenance technicians\u003c\/strong\u003e: sectioning raw materials before turning or milling.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e precision cutting on thin sheets (for thin sheets, consider hydraulic shears or circular metal saws).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking height\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e760 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1480 x 1700 x 2000 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e390 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlywheel diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e325 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpan (opening)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 mm \/ 12.60\"\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaterial stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e500 mm with scale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRAL 7035 \/ RAL 7005\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCooling\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElectric pump\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20–120 m\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCutting radius\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0°–60° right \/ 45° left\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlade dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2910 x 27 x 0.9 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-phase 400 V, 1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the HBS 250 A cut?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfiles, tubes, solid bars, and rolled steel, aluminum, and cast iron within the indicated section limits.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCutting capacity is expressed in mm of maximum section for round, square, and rectangular profiles. For extra-hard materials, reduce band speed and use blades with appropriate tooth pitch.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat type of blade does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBimetal blade for cutting steel, carbon steel blade for soft metals.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eKrollit supplies original Bernardo blades in various tooth pitches to optimize cutting based on material type and thickness.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat cutting speed does it offer?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Band speed\" in the technical table: typically adjustable in 2-4 steps or continuously (Vario).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eLow speeds (15-30 m\/min) for alloy steels, high speeds (50-80 m\/min) for light alloys and aluminum. Incorrect selection accelerates blade wear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated cooling?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models are equipped with a cooling pump with a collection tank and drip tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCooling (with cutting oil or emulsion) extends blade life and improves cutting quality on hard materials. For dry cutting, use specific blades.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does it weigh and how is it installed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: industrial models weigh from 150 to over 400 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSaws over 200 kg require adequate flooring and anchoring. The machine must be positioned in a clear space for handling long profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52000089342280,"sku":"570005","price":8995.27,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Sega_a_nastro_per_metallo_Flott_HBS_250_A_con_taglio_angolare.png?v=1763119881"},{"product_id":"frese-trapani-sb-p40-stg-pv-electronic-facelift","title":"Pillar Drill Flott SB P40 STG PV Electronic","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB P40 STG PV Electronic is a professional pillar drill with a speed of 100–2,000 rpm and a weight of 440 kg. Krollit has been an official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity: 35 \/ 40 mm (steel E335 \/ ST60)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. tapping capacity: M30 (depending on pitch)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 160 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn-spindle distance: 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn diameter: 125 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWork surface (W x D): 590 x 450 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB P40 STG PV Electronic and for what?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the SB P40 STG PV Electronic for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap, and repetitive work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB P40 STG PV Electronic is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SB P40 STG PV Electronic for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB P40 STG PV Electronic is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance personnel and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for domestic use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35 \/ 40 mm (steel E335 \/ ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. tapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM30 (depending on pitch)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel \/ working area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150–700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn-spindle distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed R1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100–2,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed R2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70–1,400 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK IV\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface (W x D)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e590 x 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions without VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 x 850 x 1920 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e637 x 1096 x 2120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 slots – 160 mm distance – 14\/26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed (mm\/rev)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0–300\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey or transparent cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArticle codes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e207.208 – 207.226 – 207.209 – 207.227\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the SB P40 STG PV Electronic?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. For harder materials or alloys, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in step models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while step models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tap?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a robust workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor fixing with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Grey R1","offer_id":52001135264072,"sku":"207208","price":18628.63,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"Grey R2","offer_id":52001135296840,"sku":"207209","price":18628.63,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"R1 Transparent","offer_id":52001135329608,"sku":"207226","price":18628.63,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"R2 Transparent","offer_id":52001135362376,"sku":"207227","price":18628.63,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_a_colonna_SB_P40_STG_PV_Electronic_con_avanzamento_digitale.png?v=1763128800"},{"product_id":"frese-trapani-flott-sb-30-mv-plus","title":"Pillar drill Flott SB 30 MV Plus","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott SB 30 MV Plus is a professional pillar drill weighing 390 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. tapping capacity: R1: M24x3 – R2: M20x2.5 – R3: M30x3.5\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 125 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn-spindle distance: 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn diameter: 125 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWork surface: 590 x 450 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFeed: 0.10 \/ 0.16 \/ 0.25 mm\/rev\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB 30 MV Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the SB 30 MV Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap, and repetitive work on various-sized parts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlott SB 30 MV Plus is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the SB 30 MV Plus is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB 30 MV Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on various-sized parts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for domestic use, consider compact benchtop models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. tapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: M24x3 – R2: M20x2.5 – R3: M30x3.5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel \/ Work area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150–700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: 27\/32 mm (at 100 Nm) \/ R2: 25\/30 mm (at 70 Nm) \/ R3: 30\/35 mm (at 200 Nm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn-spindle distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed R1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0–1,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed R2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0–1,600 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed R3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0–4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK III\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e590 x 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions without VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 x 900 x 1,980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 x 1,100 x 2,140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e390 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.10 \/ 0.16 \/ 0.25 mm\/rev\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePart No.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230.505 (R1) \/ 230.506 (R2) \/ 230.507 (R3)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-phase 400 V – 3.0 kW with inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the SB 30 MV Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloys, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed rate to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards, and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tap?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact benchtop models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBenchtop models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"R1","offer_id":52002004795720,"sku":"230505","price":15870.54,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"R2","offer_id":52002004828488,"sku":"230506","price":15870.54,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"R3","offer_id":52002004861256,"sku":"230507","price":18216.63,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_a_colonna_Flott_SB_30_MV_Plus_con_inverter_e_display_OLED.png?v=1763139289"},{"product_id":"utensili-trapano-colonna-flott-sb-30-plus","title":"Flott SB 30 Plus Pedestal Drill - Pedestal Drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott SB 30 Plus -Pillar drilling machine is a pillar drilling machine for professional use, weighing 370 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThreading performance: R1: M24x3 – R2: M20x2.5 – R3: M30x3.5\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 125 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eArm (Ausladung): 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn diameter: 125 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWork surface: 590 × 450 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle\/table distance: 150–700 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB 30 Plus -Pillar drilling machine and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the SB 30 Plus -Pillar drilling machine for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, threading with a tapping head, and repetitive work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB 30 Plus -Pillar drilling machine is part of the Flott pillar drilling machine range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the SB 30 Plus -Pillar drilling machine is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB 30 Plus -Pillar drilling machine is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, threading with a tapping head.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for domestic use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capabilities\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling performance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: 27\/32 mm – R2: 25\/30 mm – R3: 30\/35 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFLOTT Digital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle\/table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150–700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0–1000 \/ 0–1600 \/ 0–4000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK III\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e590 × 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 × 900 × 1980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with packaging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 × 1100 × 2140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e370 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThreading performance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: M24x3 – R2: M20x2.5 – R3: M30x3.5\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArm (Ausladung)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem codes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230.500 \/ 230.501 \/ 230.502\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRPM indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFLOTT Digital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFLOTT 3 kW – 400 V with inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the SB 30 Plus -Pillar drilling machine?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloy steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you adjust the spindle speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards, and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow threading with a tapping head?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with right\/left rotation as standard allow threading with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Threading\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (industrial Profi models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"R1","offer_id":52014308229448,"sku":"230500","price":12921.36,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"R2","offer_id":52014308262216,"sku":"230501","price":12921.36,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false},{"title":"R3","offer_id":52014308294984,"sku":"230502","price":15739.66,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_a_colonna_FLOTT_SB_30_Plus_con_regolazione_continua.png?v=1763390410"},{"product_id":"trapano-a-colonna-flott-tbz-23-plus-senza-tavola-intermedia","title":"Pillar drill Flott TBZ 23 Plus","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott TBZ 23 Plus is a professional pillar drill, with speeds R1: 20–2000 rpm • R2: 30–3000 rpm, weight 250 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity: R1: 23\/25 mm – R2: 20\/23 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapping capacity: R1: M16 × 1 – R2: M12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThroat depth: 260 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn diameter: 110 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWork surface: 420 × 340 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TBZ 23 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabricators use the TBZ 23 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap holder, and repetitive work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TBZ 23 Plus is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the TBZ 23 Plus is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TBZ 23 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap holder.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine; for home use, consider compact benchtop models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: 23\/25 mm – R2: 20\/23 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: M16 × 1 – R2: M12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: 20–2000 rpm • R2: 30–3000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 – 590 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-base distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 – 670 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK II\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 × 340 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430 × 715 × 1250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThroat depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 × 125 mm (13\/26 mm)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e570 × 940 × 1600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItems\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e223.022 (R1) – 223.027 (R2)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOn rack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDisplay\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOLED + digital indicators\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V – 1.5 kW with inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the TBZ 23 Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) connections are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tap holder?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial drills require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"R1","offer_id":52014771568968,"sku":"223022","price":8830.56,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"R2","offer_id":52014771601736,"sku":"223027","price":8022.89,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_TBZ_23_Plus_trapano_a_colonna_senza_tavola_intermedia.png?v=1763396811"},{"product_id":"mola-da-banco-doppia-flott-ts-200-sd-p","title":"Flott TS 200 SD P Belt Grinder","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TS 200 SD P is a professional grinder available from Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheel dimensions: 200 × 32 × 32 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRotational speed: 2800 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuction connection: Diameter 42 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMachine dimensions: 250 × 470 × 230 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePackaging dimensions: 325 × 540 × 310 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheel equipment: 1 coarse grit + 1 fine grit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TS 200 SD P and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TS 200 SD P for grinding and satin finishing stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, removing burrs and finishing surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TS 200 SD P is part of the Flott grinder range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TS 200 SD P for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TS 200 SD P is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e: grinding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetalworking shops and production laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: burr removal, deburring of cuts, and surface finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror polishing of chrome (dedicated polishing machines with abrasive pastes are needed for final chrome finishes).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 × 32 × 32 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 × 470 × 230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e325 × 540 × 310 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiameter 42 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel equipment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 coarse grit + 1 fine grit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArticle codes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e317.762 – 317.774 – 317.777\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine type\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDouble bench grinder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSafety level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHigh (adjustable screens and guards)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRotational speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2800 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-phase 400 V – 1.0 kW (intermittent use 30 min)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the TS 200 SD P grind?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys and (in some models) also wood with appropriate abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA specific belt grit is used for each material: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat size abrasive belt does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt dimensions\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumable spare parts: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize the finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer Vario or multi-step speeds (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u003e20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u003c10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to prevent burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated suction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer a suction connection for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSuction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and for wood (fire risk from sparks). Check the connection diameter for connection to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for benchtop and column models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eColumn models require floor mounting, while benchtop models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Without base","offer_id":52018246222152,"sku":"317762","price":1388.31,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"With base - emergency button and brake - suction system","offer_id":52018246254920,"sku":"317777","price":3607.56,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"With base - emergency stop button and brake","offer_id":52018246287688,"sku":"317774","price":2507.09,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_TS_200_SD_P_Mola_da_banco_doppia_per_lavorazioni_professionali.png?v=1763458124"},{"product_id":"mola-da-banco-doppia-flott-ts-200-pro-s1","title":"Flott TS 200 Pro Grinder","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TS 200 Pro is a professional grinder, weighing 20 kg. Krollit has been an official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheel diameter: 200 × 32 × 32 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: Three-phase 400 V – 0.75 kW (S1)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRotation speed: 2550 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDust extraction connection: Ø 42 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMachine dimensions: 250 × 470 × 230 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePackaging dimensions: 300 × 480 × 275 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TS 200 Pro and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TS 200 Pro for grinding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, including deburring and surface finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TS 200 Pro is part of the Flott grinder range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TS 200 Pro for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TS 200 Pro is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e: grinding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetalworking shops and production laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: deburring, removing cutting burrs, and surface finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror polishing of chrome (for final chrome finishes, dedicated polishers with abrasive pastes are needed).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 × 470 × 230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 × 480 × 275 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 × 32 × 32 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 42 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDiscs included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 coarse grit + 1 fine grit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOptional\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStand, dust extraction, emergency button, brake\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem codes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e317.845 – 317.846 – 317.847\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRotation speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2550 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-phase 400 V – 0.75 kW (S1)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the TS 200 Pro grind?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys, and (in some models) even wood with suitable abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor each material, a specific abrasive grit is used: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat size abrasive belt does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt dimensions\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumable spare parts: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize the finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer Vario or multi-step speeds (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u003e20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u003c10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to prevent burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated dust extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer a dust extraction connection for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and for wood (fire risk from sparks). Check the connection diameter for connection to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for bench and column models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eColumn models require floor mounting, while bench models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"With Base - emergency button and brake - suction system","offer_id":52018713231688,"sku":"317847","price":3763.72,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"With Base - emergency stop button and brake","offer_id":52018713264456,"sku":"317846","price":2669.35,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"Without Stand","offer_id":52018713297224,"sku":"317845","price":1527.39,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_TS_200_Pro_Mola_da_banco_doppia_per_uso_continuo.png?v=1763461252"},{"product_id":"mola-da-banco-doppia-flott-ts-300-sd-p","title":"Flott TS 300 SD P Belt Sander","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TS 300 SD P is a professional grinder, weighing 40 kg. Krollit has been an official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheel size: 300 × 40 × 51 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpeed: 1250 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eExtraction pre-arrangement: Ø 42 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMachine dimensions: 350 × 530 × 340 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 40 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheels included: 1 coarse grit \/ 1 fine grit\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TS 300 SD P and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and carpentry shops use the TS 300 SD P for grinding and satin finishing stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, removing burrs and finishing surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TS 300 SD P is part of the Flott grinder range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the machine suitable for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TS 300 SD P for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TS 300 SD P is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e: grinding and satin finishing stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry shops and production laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: burr removal, cutting deburring, and surface finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror polishing chrome (dedicated polishing machines with abrasive pastes are needed for final chrome finishes).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 × 40 × 51 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e350 × 530 × 340 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOn pallet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtraction pre-arrangement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 42 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheels included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 coarse grit \/ 1 fine grit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElectrical requirement\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCEE 16 A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem codes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e317.764 – 317.776 – 317.779\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable versions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBasic \/ with stand \/ with integrated extraction + brake + emergency stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1250 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-phase 400 V – 2.2 kW – S2 30 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the TS 300 SD P grind?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys and (in some models) even wood with suitable abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA specific belt grit is used for each material: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat size abrasive belt does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt dimensions\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumable spare parts: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize the finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer Vario or multi-step speeds (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u003e20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u003c10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to avoid burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer an extraction port for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eExtraction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and for wood (fire risk from sparks). Check the connection diameter for connection to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for bench and pedestal models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedestal models require floor mounting; bench models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Without base","offer_id":52019137675592,"sku":"317764","price":2653.49,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"With Base - emergency button and brake - suction system","offer_id":52019137708360,"sku":"317779","price":5780.46,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"With Base - emergency stop button and brake","offer_id":52019137741128,"sku":"317776","price":4143.16,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_TS_300_SD_P_mola_da_banco_doppia_professionale_da_300_mm.png?v=1763466202"},{"product_id":"levigatrici-flott-bsm-150","title":"Flott BSM 150 Grinding Machine","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BSM 150 is a professional belt sander, weighing 90 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBelt size: 2000 x 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSanding area: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBelt speed: 30 m\/s\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 3.75 kW – 400 V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 90 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions without VP: 1100 x 550 x 1035 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the BSM 150 and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the BSM 150 for sanding and satin finishing stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, including deburring and surface finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BSM 150 is part of the Flott belt sander range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare part order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the BSM 150 is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe BSM 150 is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e: sanding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetalworking shops and production laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: burr removal, cutting deburring, and surface finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror polishing chrome (dedicated polishing machines with abrasive pastes are needed for final chrome finishes).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBelt size\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 x 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSanding area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBelt speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30 m\/s\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.75 kW – 400 V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions without VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1100 x 550 x 1035 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e800 x 600 x 1450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 years (single shift)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the BSM 150 sand?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys, and (in some models) even wood with appropriate abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor each material, a specific belt grit is used: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat abrasive belt dimensions does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt size\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumable spare parts: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize the finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer Vario or multi-step speeds (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u0026gt;20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u0026lt;10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to avoid burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated dust extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer dust extraction ports for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and for wood (fire risk from sparks). Check the connection diameter for linking to a central system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for benchtop and pedestal models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedestal models require floor mounting, while benchtop models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52020475330888,"sku":"374020","price":2832.84,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Levigatrice_a_nastro_Flott_BSM_150_con_nastro_2000x150_mm.png?v=1763479659"},{"product_id":"flott-tsb-250-p-doppia-smerigliatrice","title":"FESTOOL TSB 250 P Sander","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TSB 250 P is a professional-grade grinder, weighing 35 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrinding wheel dimensions: 250 x 40 x 51 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrinding wheel grit: 80\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAbrasive belt: 1300 x 75 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBelt speed: 15 m\/s\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 400 V three-phase\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePower: 1.4 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TSB 250 P and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TSB 250 P for grinding and satin finishing stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, removing burrs and surface finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TSB 250 P is part of Flott's range of grinders, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TSB 250 P for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TSB 250 P is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e: grinding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarpentry and production workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: burr removal, cutting deburring, and surface finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror polishing chrome (dedicated polishing machines with abrasive pastes are needed for final chrome finishes).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrinding wheel dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 x 40 x 51 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrinding wheel grit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBelt speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 m\/s\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 50 mm (x2)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAbrasive belt\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1300 x 75 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRevolutions\/min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1400\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNoise level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e78 dB(A)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem No. table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e330.360\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem No. stand + brake\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e330.365\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem No. dust extraction + brake\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e330.370\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAvailable versions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable \/ With stand \/ With dust extraction + brake\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.4 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the TSB 250 P grind?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys, and (in some models) even wood with suitable abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA specific grit belt is used for each material: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat abrasive belt sizes does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt dimensions\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumable spare parts: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer variable speed or multi-step (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u0026gt;20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u0026lt;10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to prevent burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated dust extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer a dust extraction connection for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and for wood (risk of fire from sparks). Check connection diameter for connection to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for bench and pedestal models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedestal models require floor mounting, while bench models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"With Base - emergency button and brake - suction system","offer_id":52020476674376,"sku":"330370","price":6169.65,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"With Base - emergency stop button and brake","offer_id":52020476707144,"sku":"330365","price":4433.53,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"Without Stand","offer_id":52020476739912,"sku":"330360","price":2954.84,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_TSB_250_P_Smerigliatrice_combinata_professionale.png?v=1763477851"},{"product_id":"levigatrici-flott-bsm-150-apol","title":"Flott BSM 150 A\/pol Sander","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BSM 150 A\/pol. is a professional-grade grinder, weighing 105 kg. Krollit has been an official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBelt dimensions: 2000 x 150 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrinding area: 600 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBelt speed: 15 \/ 30 m\/s\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrinder motor: 3.0 \/ 3.75 kW – three-phase 400 V\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuction capacity: approx. 630 m³\/h\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuction motor: 0.37 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the BSM 150 A\/pol. and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the BSM 150 A\/pol. for grinding and satin finishing stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, removing burrs, and finishing surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott BSM 150 A\/pol. is part of the Flott range of grinders, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the BSM 150 A\/pol. for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe BSM 150 A\/pol. is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e: grinding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetalworking shops and production laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: deburring, removing cutting burrs, and surface finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror polishing chrome (dedicated polishing machines with abrasive pastes are needed for final chrome plating).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBelt dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2000 x 150 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e105 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions without VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1100 x 550 x 1035 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e800 x 600 x 1450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMotor and power supply\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrinder motor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.0 \/ 3.75 kW – three-phase 400 V\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuction motor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.37 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor warranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 years (single shift)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrinding area\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuction capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eapprox. 630 m³\/h\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBelt speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 \/ 30 m\/s\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the BSM 150 A\/pol. grind?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys and (in some models) also wood with appropriate abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA specific belt grit is used for each material: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat size abrasive belt does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt dimensions\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumable spare parts: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize the finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer Vario or multi-step speeds (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u003e20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u003c10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to avoid burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated suction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer a suction connection for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSuction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and for wood (fire risk from sparks). Check the connection diameter for connection to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for bench and pedestal models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedestal models require floor mounting, while bench models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52021216215368,"sku":"374022","price":4141.94,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Levigatrice_a_nastro_Flott_BSM_150_A_pol._con_sistema_di_aspirazione.png?v=1763481337"},{"product_id":"affilatrici-flott-ts-175-pro","title":"Flott TS 175 Pro Belt Sander","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TS 175 Pro is a professional grinder, weighing 15 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrinding wheel dimensions: 175 x 25 x 32 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpeed: 2750 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDust extraction connection: Ø 42 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions without VP: 230 x 440 x 210 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions with VP: 260 x 450 x 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWeight: 15 kg\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TS 175 Pro and for what purpose\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops use the TS 175 Pro for grinding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, including deburring and surface finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TS 175 Pro is part of the Flott grinder range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the TS 175 Pro is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TS 175 Pro is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e: grinding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetal fabrication shops and production laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: deburring, removing cutting burrs, and surface finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror-finish chrome polishing (dedicated polishing machines with abrasive pastes are needed for final chrome plating).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrinding wheel dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e175 x 25 x 32 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2750 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 42 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions without VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 x 440 x 210 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 x 450 x 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrinding wheel equipment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 coarse + 1 fine\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eProtections\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpark guard + eye protection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.7 kW – 400 V – S1 (continuous duty)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the TS 175 Pro grind?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys, and (on some models) even wood with suitable abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA specific belt grit is used for each material: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat size abrasive belt does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt dimensions\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumables: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize the finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer variable or multi-step speeds (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u0026gt;20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u0026lt;10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to prevent burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated dust extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer a dust extraction connection for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and for wood (fire risk from sparks). Check the connection diameter for connection to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for bench and pedestal models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePedestal models require floor mounting, while bench models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"TS 175 Pro – Standard","offer_id":52021844738376,"sku":"317840","price":1434.67,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"TS 175 Pro – With base – EMERGENCY STOP button and motor brake","offer_id":52021844771144,"sku":"317841","price":2941.42,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"TS 175 Pro – With base frame - Integrated dust extraction - Emergency Stop and brake","offer_id":52021844803912,"sku":"317842","price":3535.58,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Smerigliatrice_doppia_Flott_TS_175_Pro_con_mole_da_175_mm.png?v=1763485353"},{"product_id":"smerigliatrici-flott-ts-175-sd-p","title":"Belt sander Flott TS 175 SD P","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TS 175 SD P is a professional grinder, weighing 15 kg. Krollit has been the official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWheel dimensions: 175 x 25 x 32 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 0.7 kW – 400 V – S2-30 min\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpeed: 2740 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDust extraction connection: Ø 42 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions without VP: 230 x 440 x 210 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDimensions with VP: 260 x 450 x 250 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TS 175 SD P and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TS 175 SD P for grinding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys, with burr removal and surface finishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TS 175 SD P is part of the Flott grinder range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping within 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Italian-speaking customer support available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TS 175 SD P for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TS 175 SD P is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops for metal finishing\u003c\/strong\u003e: grinding and satin finishing of stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMetalworking shops and production laboratories\u003c\/strong\u003e: burr removal, cutting deburring, and surface finishing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNot suitable for:\u003c\/strong\u003e mirror polishing chrome (dedicated polishing machines with abrasive pastes are needed for final chrome finishes).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTechnical specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e175 x 25 x 32 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.7 kW – 400 V – S2-30 min\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2740 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDust extraction connection\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eØ 42 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions without VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 x 440 x 210 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 x 450 x 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWheel equipment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1 coarse grit + 1 fine grit\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months (single shift)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat can the TS 175 SD P grind?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStainless steel, aluminum, metal alloys and (in some models) also wood with appropriate abrasive belts.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor each material, a specific belt grit is used: 60-80 for roughing, 120-180 for finishing, 240+ for pre-polishing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat abrasive belt dimensions does it use?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Belt dimensions\" in the technical table: typically from 75x2,000 mm to 150x2,500 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBelts are consumable spare parts: Krollit supplies original Bernardo belts in various grit sizes to optimize the finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eIs the belt speed adjustable?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer Vario or multi-step speeds (typically 4-8 steps).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eHigh speeds (\u003e20 m\/s) for stainless steel and finishing, low speeds (\u003c10 m\/s) for wood and soft materials to avoid burning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes it have integrated dust extraction?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eProfessional models offer a dust extraction connection for grinding dust.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDust extraction is essential for stainless steel (respirable dust) and for wood (fire risk from sparks). Check the connection diameter for connection to a centralized system.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow much does the machine weigh?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Weight\" in the technical table: typically 50-200 kg for bench and pillar models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003ePillar models require floor mounting, while bench models are installed on a sturdy bench of adequate size.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"TS 175 SD P Standard","offer_id":52025991692616,"sku":"317761","price":1177.24,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"TS 175 SD P + stand with water immersion tank","offer_id":52025985139016,"sku":"350435","price":1498.11,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"TS 175 SD P + base with suction system – MA 400 D","offer_id":52025985171784,"sku":"330295","price":2366.78,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Smerigliatrice_doppia_Flott_TS_175_SD_P_con_doppia_mola_da_175_mm.png?v=1763553080"},{"product_id":"flott-tb-23-plus-trapano-da-banco","title":"Flott TB 23 Plus Bench Drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott TB 23 Plus is a professional pillar drill, weighing 235 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStandard: DIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling E335\/ST60 steels: R1: 23\/25 mm – R2: 20\/23 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThread cutting: R1: M16 – R2: M12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle stroke: 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn-spindle distance: 260 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn diameter: 110 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TB 23 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TB 23 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFlott TB 23 Plus is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit is an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TB 23 Plus for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TB 23 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling E335\/ST60 steels\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: 23\/25 mm – R2: 20\/23 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, Tools and Speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn-spindle distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: 20–2000 rpm – R2: 30–3000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230–730 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK II\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, Dimensions and Geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 x 340 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 slots – 13\/26 mm – 125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430 x 715 x 1250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e570 x 940 x 1600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e235 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThreading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: M16 – R2: M12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem No. R1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e223.021\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem No. R2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e223.026\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-phase 400 V with inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat drilling capacity does the TB 23 Plus have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed alloys, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) connections are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reducers) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Threading\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy bench, while column or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"R1","offer_id":52027553579336,"sku":"223021","price":8556.06,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"R2","offer_id":52027553612104,"sku":"223026","price":7550.74,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_TB_23_Plus_Trapano_da_banco_400V_con_inverter.png?v=1763563482"},{"product_id":"flott-tb-25-plus-trapano-da-banco","title":"Drill press Flott TB 25 Plus","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott TB 25 Plus is a professional pillar drill weighing 250 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStandard: DIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling E335\/ST60 steel: 23\/25 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThreading: M16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle travel: 115 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn-spindle distance: 260 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn diameter: 110 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TB 25 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TB 25 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping, and repetitive work on various sized pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TB 25 Plus is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for assistance with selection.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TB 25 Plus for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TB 25 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance workers and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on various sized pieces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact benchtop models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling E335\/ST60 steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23\/25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e115 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn-spindle distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20–2000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230–590 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-base distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230–670 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK III\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 x 340 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 slots – 13\/26 mm – 125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430 x 715 x 1250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e570 x 940 x 1600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThreading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeatures\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLED, OLED display, spindle guard with interlock, emergency stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase with inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.5 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the TB 25 Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed metals, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed rate to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in step models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while step models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material prolongs tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) fittings are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Threading\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the machine's weight and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact benchtop models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBenchtop models are installed on a robust workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52027577991496,"sku":"225011","price":8974.53,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_TB_25_Plus_Trapano_da_banco_400V_con_regolazione_continua.png?v=1763564140"},{"product_id":"flott-sb-15-plus-trapano-a-colonna","title":"Pillar drill Flott SB 15 Plus","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB 15 Plus is a professional-grade pillar drill, weighing 88 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStandard: DIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle stroke: 70 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity in steel: 15\/18 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapping capacity: M12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVariable speed: 40–4000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking distance: 220 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB 15 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops use the SB 15 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on various sized workpieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB 15 Plus is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SB 15 Plus for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB 15 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on various sized workpieces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine; for domestic use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity in steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15\/18 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–4000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle–table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003emax 750 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK II\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e220 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 x 240 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 slots – 14\/26 – 125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e88 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 x 540 x 1780 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e572 x 936 x 2142 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOffset\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRPM indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital (OLED)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFeed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eManual\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the SB 15 Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling Capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you adjust the spindle speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle Taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards, and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reducers) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/Left Rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from about 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor fixing with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52027826929992,"sku":"212750","price":5416.89,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_SB_15_Plus_Trapano_a_colonna_professionale_230V.png?v=1763566156"},{"product_id":"frese-trapani-flott-tbz-13-plus","title":"Flott TBZ 13 Plus Bench Drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TBZ 13 Plus is a professional pillar drill with a speed range of 40 – 4,000 rpm and a weight of 70 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling depth: 60 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity: 13\/15 mm (E335 \/ ST60)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMax. tapping capacity: M10\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle taper: B16 or MK2\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle speed: 40 – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 0.54 kW – 230 V – Inverter\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the TBZ 13 Plus and what for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the TBZ 13 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping machine, and repetitive tasks on workpieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott TBZ 13 Plus is part of Flott's range of pillar drills, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian is available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the TBZ 13 Plus for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe TBZ 13 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping machine.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on workpieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobbyist use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling depth\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13\/15 mm (E335 \/ ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel \/ working space\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 – 490 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, Tools and Speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eB16 or MK2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 – 4,000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn–spindle distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e214 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, Dimensions and Geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e82 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface (L x W)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 x 250 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 – 14\/26 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions without VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e355 x 485 x 1,027 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with VP\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e940 x 570 x 1,600 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDimensions with cabinet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e370 x 495 x 1800 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCabinet + packaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e940 x 570 x 2140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMax. tapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM10\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years (single shift)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArticle No.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e212.650 (B16) – 212.655 (MK2)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHead adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOn rack\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.54 kW – 230 V – Inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the TBZ 13 Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. For harder materials or alloys, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you adjust the spindle speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) mounts are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping machine?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard left\/right rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Left\/right rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"TBZ 13 Plus with MK2 spindle","offer_id":52027901968712,"sku":"212655","price":4775.14,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"TBZ 13 Plus with B16 chuck","offer_id":52027902001480,"sku":"212650","price":4593.15,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Trapano_a_colonna_Flott_TBZ_13_Plus_con_display_digitale_OLED.png?v=1763568975"},{"product_id":"flott-sb-23-plus-trapano-a-colonna","title":"Pillar drill Flott SB 23 Plus","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott SB 23 Plus is a professional pillar drill weighing 290 kg. Krollit has been an official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStandard: DIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling (E335\/ST60): R1: 23\/25 mm – R2: 20\/23 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThreading: R1: M16 – R2: M12\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle stroke: 100 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVariable speed: R1: 20–2000 rpm – R2: 30–3000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking distance: 260 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB 23 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and carpentry shops use the SB 23 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, threading with a tapping tool, and repetitive work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB 23 Plus is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SB 23 Plus for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB 23 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and carpentry\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, threading with a tapping tool.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance workers and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: 23\/25 mm – R2: 20\/23 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: 20–2000 rpm – R2: 30–3000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle–table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230–850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK II\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 x 340 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 slots – 13\/26 mm – 125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e290 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430 x 715 x 1800 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThreading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: M16 – R2: M12\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArt. Nº R1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e223.020\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArt. Nº R2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e223.025\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital (OLED)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase, 1.5 kW, integrated inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the SB 23 Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard, unhardened steel. For harder materials or alloyed metals, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) fittings are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow threading with a tapping tool?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow threading with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Threading\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from about 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy bench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"R1","offer_id":52027912421704,"sku":"223020","price":8997.71,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"R2","offer_id":52027912454472,"sku":"223025","price":8509.7,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_SB_23_Plus_Trapano_a_colonna_400V_ad_alte_prestazioni.png?v=1763568946"},{"product_id":"flott-sb-25-plus-trapano-a-colonna","title":"Flott SB 25 Plus Pedestal Drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB 25 Plus is a professional pillar drilling machine, weighing 290 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStandard: DIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity (steel): 23\/25 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThreading: M16\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle stroke: 115 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVariable speed: 20–2000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWorking distance: 260 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB 25 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the SB 25 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, threading with a tapping machine, and repetitive work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB 25 Plus is part of the Flott pillar drilling machine range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SB 25 Plus for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB 25 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, threading with a tapping machine.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance personnel and repair workshops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobbyist use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact benchtop models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity (steel)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23\/25 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e115 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20–2000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230–850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK III\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWorking distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e260 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 x 340 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 slots – 13\/26 mm – 125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e290 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e430 x 715 x 1800 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 x 1100 x 2140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThreading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM16\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital (OLED)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V – 1.5 kW – with inverter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the SB 25 Plus?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard, unhardened steel. For harder or alloyed materials, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed rate to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in step models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while step models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3, or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards, and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow threading with a tapping machine?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow threading with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Threading\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact benchtop models) to over 250 kg (industrial Profi models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBenchtop models are installed on a sturdy bench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52028037693768,"sku":"225010","price":9200.23,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_SB_25_Plus_Trapano_a_colonna_industriale_400V.png?v=1763572093"},{"product_id":"flott-sb-40-plus-trapano-a-colonna","title":"Flott SB 40 Plus Pedestal Drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott SB 40 Plus is a professional pillar drill, weighing 400–420 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStandard: DIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThreading: R1: M30 – R2: M24 – R3: M36\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle stroke: 160 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle-column distance: 300 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn diameter: 140 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWork surface: 590 x 450 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB 40 Plus and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops use the SB 40 Plus for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap chuck, and repetitive work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB 40 Plus fits into the Flott range of pillar drills, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SB 40 Plus for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB 40 Plus is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance workers and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobbyist use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: 30\/35 mm – R2: 27\/32 mm – R3: 35\/40 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150–700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK IV\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e590 x 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400–420 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 x 900 x 1980 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 x 1100 x 2200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStandard\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDIN EN 55011:2016 + A1:2017\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThreading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eR1: M30 – R2: M24 – R3: M36\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem No. R1\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230.530\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem No. R2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230.531\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem No. R3\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230.532\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRPM indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital (OLED)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat drilling capacity does the SB 40 Plus have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloy steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tap chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Threading\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (industrial Profi models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a robust workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor fixing with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"R1","offer_id":52028090909000,"sku":"230530","price":13935.22,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"R2","offer_id":52028090941768,"sku":"230531","price":13935.22,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"R3","offer_id":52028090974536,"sku":"230532","price":17060.96,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_SB_40_Plus_Trapano_a_colonna_industriale_ad_alta_potenza.png?v=1763573038"},{"product_id":"flott-gb-50-mv-trapano-a-ingranaggi","title":"Pillar drill Flott GB 50 MV","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott GB 50 MV is a professional pillar drilling machine, with speeds 54 \/ 75 \/ 109 \/ 169 \/ 237 \/ 344 \/ 507 \/ 712 \/ 1032 rpm, weight 795 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity: 50 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapping capacity: M36\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle stroke: 230 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle-column distance: 400 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColumn diameter: 200 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWork surface: 550 x 550 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the GB 50 MV and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops use the GB 50 MV for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap holder, and repetitive work on various sized pieces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott GB 50 MV is part of the Flott pillar drilling machine range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the GB 50 MV for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe GB 50 MV is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tap holder.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on various sized pieces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eProcessing Capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling Capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle Stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e230 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth Indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMechanical scale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, Tools and Speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50–850 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle Taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK IV\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle Speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e54 \/ 75 \/ 109 \/ 169 \/ 237 \/ 344 \/ 507 \/ 712 \/ 1032 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, Dimensions and Geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e550 x 550 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTable adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRack and pinion + swivel and tilting table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e795 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e600 x 1060 x 2450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e680 x 2600 x 1210 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-slots\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 slots – 16\/28 mm – center distance 160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther Specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTapping capacity\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM36\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0.1 – 0.2 – 0.3 – 0.4 mm\/rev\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGear lubrication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic via oil pump\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-phase 400 V – 3 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the GB 50 MV?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you adjust the spindle speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical gear or belt change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and tool types does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle Taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) mounts are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drilling machine allow tapping with a tap holder?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drilling machines without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (industrial Profi models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy bench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52031408669000,"sku":"287040","price":25276.72,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/FLOTT_GB_50_MV_Trapano_a_colonna_a_ingranaggi_da_50_mm.png?v=1763630594"},{"product_id":"flott-sb-m3-st-trapano-universale","title":"Drill press Flott SB M3 ST","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott SB M3 ST is a professional pillar drill, weighing 275 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling steel: 25\/30 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThreading: M20\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle stroke: 125 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRPM indication: Mechanical scale\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVariable speed: 125–4000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: Three-phase 400 V – 0.9\/1.45 kW – multi-pole\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB M3 ST and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the SB M3 ST for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB M3 ST is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho the SB M3 ST is for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB M3 ST is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance personnel and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobbyist use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine; for domestic use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25\/30 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWith fine adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125–4000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240–790 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK III\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed ranges\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStage 1: 125–2000 rpm – Stage 2: 250–4000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 x 340 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e275 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e520 x 820 x 1900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 x 1100 x 2140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThreading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM20\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRPM indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMechanical scale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-phase 400 V – 0.9\/1.45 kW – multi-pole\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the SB M3 ST?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill diameter and material prolongs tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3, or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards, and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow threading with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow threading with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Threading\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (Profi industrial models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52031776883016,"sku":"205180","price":8623.16,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_SB_M3_ST_Trapano_universale_400V_con_regolazione_continua.png?v=1763634758"},{"product_id":"flott-sb-m5-st-trapano-universale","title":"Pillar drill Flott SB M5 ST","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB M5 ST is a professional pillar drill, weighing 440 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling steel: 35\/40 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThreading: M20\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle stroke: 160 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRPM indication: Mechanical scale\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVariable speed: 100–2000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 400 V three-phase multipolar, 1.5 \/ 3.0 kW\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB M5 ST and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops use the SB M5 ST for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, threading with a tapping head, and repetitive work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB M5 ST is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performances: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer assistance in Italian is available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SB M5 ST for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB M5 ST is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metal fabrication shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, threading with a tapping head.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintainers and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobbyist use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capabilities\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35\/40 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle stroke\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eScale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFine adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100–2000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e300 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150–700 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK IV\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed change\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStepless (continuous)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e590 x 450 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e440 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610 x 850 x 1920 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e637 x 1096 x 2120 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThreading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM20\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRPM indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMechanical scale\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eArt. Nr. 205.204\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V three-phase multipolar, 1.5 \/ 3.0 kW\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the SB M5 ST?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in step models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while step models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3, or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards, and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow threading with a tapping head?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow threading with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Threading\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWeight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (industrial Profi models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52031802900808,"sku":"205204","price":11419.49,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_SB_M5_ST_Trapano_universale_400V_professionale.png?v=1763635464"},{"product_id":"flott-sb-p30-st-trapano-a-colonna-universale","title":"Flott SB P30 ST Pillar Drill","description":"\u003cp\u003eFlott SB P30 ST is a professional-grade pillar drill, weighing 275 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling steel: 25\/30 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTapping: M20\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle travel: 125 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eVariable speed: 125–4000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMotor: 400 V – 0.9\/1.45 kW – multi-pole\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle-column distance: 280 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB P30 ST and what for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops use the SB P30 ST for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck, and repetitive work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB P30 ST fits into the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit Logistics and Support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 business days (7 days for Southern Italy). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 business days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product data sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SB P30 ST for\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB P30 ST is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMechanical workshops and metalworking shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, tapping with a tapping chuck.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on pieces of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobbyist use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for home use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWorking capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25\/30 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth stop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWith fine adjustment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVariable speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125–4000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240–790 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK III\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 x 340 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e275 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e520 x 820 x 1900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 x 1100 x 2140 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTapping\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM20\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRPM indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V – 0.9\/1.45 kW – multi-pole\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently asked questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat drilling capacity does the SB P30 ST have?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloy steels, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed rate to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow is the spindle speed adjusted?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill bit diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3 or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reducers) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow tapping with a tapping chuck?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard left\/right rotation allow tapping with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Left\/right rotation\" or \"Tapping\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from about 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (industrial Profi models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy workbench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":52031850545480,"sku":"205181","price":9943.24,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_SB_P30_ST_Trapano_universale_professionale_con_display_digitale.png?v=1763636625"},{"product_id":"flott-sb-p30-stg-pv-electronic-trapano-universale","title":"Pillar drill Flott SB P30 STG PV","description":"\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB P30 STG PV is a professional pillar drill weighing 320 kg. Krollit, official Flott distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDrilling capacity in steel: 25\/30 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThreading: M20\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle travel: 125 mm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpindle speed: 125–4000 rpm\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSpeed ranges: Stage 1: 125–2000 – Stage 2: 250–4000\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eElectronic feed: 0–300 mm\/revolution\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho uses the SB P30 STG PV and for what\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shops and metalworking companies use the SB P30 STG PV for precision drilling on steel and cast iron, threading with a tapping head, and repetitive work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIts place in the Flott range\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Flott SB P30 STG PV is part of the Flott pillar drill range, distributed in Italy by Krollit since 2007. The Flott range includes models of various categories and performance levels: to choose the right machine for your use case, you can consult the Flott catalog on Krollit or contact customer support for selection assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eKrollit logistics and support\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMachine shipping in 5-9 working days (7 days to the South). For spare parts and accessories, shipping in 3-5 working days from Krollit warehouse. Customer support in Italian available for technical documentation, product sheets, and spare parts order management. Krollit has been an official distributor since 2007.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is the SB P30 STG PV for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe SB P30 STG PV is recommended for the following professional profiles:\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMachine shops and metalworking companies\u003c\/strong\u003e: precision drilling on steel and cast iron, threading with a tapping head.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaintenance technicians and repair shops\u003c\/strong\u003e: repetitive drilling work on parts of various sizes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOccasional hobby use\u003c\/strong\u003e: professional machine: for domestic use, consider compact bench models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eMachining capacity\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDrilling capacity in steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25\/30 mm (E335\/ST60)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle travel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDepth indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eSpindle, tools, and speed\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle speed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125–4000 rpm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed ranges\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStage 1: 125–2000 – Stage 2: 250–4000\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-column distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e280 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle-to-table distance\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e240–790 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpindle taper\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMK III\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eTable, dimensions, and geometry\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eColumn diameter\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e110 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWork table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e420 x 340 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeight\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e320 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMachine dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e520 x 820 x 1900 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePackaging dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e670 x 1100 x 2200 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eOther specifications\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThreading\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eM20\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElectronic feed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e0–300 mm\/revolution\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eItem no.\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e207.183 (grey cover), 207.220 (transparent)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWarranty\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRange change\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBelt repositioning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed indication\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDigital\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMotor\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e400 V – 0.9\/1.45 kW – multipolar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the drilling capacity of the SB P30 STG PV?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee the \"Drilling capacity\" data in the machine's technical table.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe capacity refers to standard, unhardened steel. On harder materials or alloyed metals, the actual capacity may be lower: reduce speed and feed to avoid stressing the spindle and tools.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eHow do you adjust the spindle speed?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVia mechanical belt or gear change in stepped models, via inverter or variator in Vario models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eVario models allow continuous adjustment, while stepped models require moving the belt to different pulleys. Correct speed selection based on drill diameter and material extends tool life.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat spindle taper and type of tools does it support?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSee \"Spindle taper\" in the technical table: typically MT 2, MT 3, or MT 4 depending on the model.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMT (Morse Taper) tapers are international standards, and accessories (arbors, keyless chucks, reductions) are commonly available on the market. Krollit supplies original Bernardo accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eDoes the drill allow threading with a tapping head?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly models with standard right\/left rotation allow threading with automatic tap release.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the \"Right\/left rotation\" or \"Threading\" specification: drills without mechanical reversal are not suitable for repetitive tapping.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e\n\u003cdetails\u003e\n\u003csummary\u003eWhat is the weight of the machine and what installation does it require?\u003c\/summary\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe weight varies from approximately 25 kg (compact bench models) to over 250 kg (industrial Profi models).\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBench models are installed on a sturdy bench, while pillar or radial models require floor mounting with expansion anchors for stability during drilling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003c\/details\u003e","brand":"Flott","offers":[{"title":"Grey","offer_id":52032214794568,"sku":"207183","price":16233.77,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true},{"title":"Transparent","offer_id":52032214827336,"sku":"207220","price":16233.77,"currency_code":"EUR","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0891\/2139\/0920\/files\/Flott_SB_P30_STG_PV_elettronico_Trapano_universale_con_controllo_elettronico.png?v=1763638631"}],"url":"https:\/\/www.krollit.com\/collections\/flott-machines-1.oembed?page=2","provider":"Krollit","version":"1.0","type":"link"}